LG | DP482B | Owner's Manual | LG DP482B دليل المالك

LG DP482B دليل المالك
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
DP482B
P/No. : MFL61986210
DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL61986211 1
3/18/09 8:08:42 PM
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﳑﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﲟﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻫﻠﲔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﳌﻀﻲﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ‪ -‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻳﻨﺒﺊ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ )ﺧﺪﻣﺔ( ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻛﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﺃﻳﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﺗﹸﺴﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﻳﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﻓﻒ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﹰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺎﺟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﲢﺪﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺮﻗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻟﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻭﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﺻﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫•ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﹸ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻟﻺﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺟﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ؛‬
‫ﲟﻌﻨﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻭﺩ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﹰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﹸﲢ ﹼﻤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﺧﺔ ﺗﹸﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻘﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺗﻀﺢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺎﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺰﻋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺃﺧﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻤﻲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺜﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻂ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﹰ ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ )ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻛﺄﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:08:43 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL61986212 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪3 ..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪4 ...................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪5 .........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ‪7 ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪7 ...........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪7 .........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪8-9 ...............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪9 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪10-11 .................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪11 ........................................................... DivX‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪12 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪12 ............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻦﻣ ﺮﺷﺎﺒﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﺠﺴﺘﻟﺍ‪13 ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪13 .........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺔﺒﻌﻟ ﻞﻴﻐﺸﺗ ‪14 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺔﻐﻠﻟﺍ ﺯﻮﻣﺭ ‪15 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺔﻘﻄﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﺯﻮﻣﺭ‪15 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪16 ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪16 ........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ :DVD-VIDEO‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ :DVD-R‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ :DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ :DVD+R‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ :DVD+RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ CD-R/CD-RW‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD±R/RW‬ﻭ‪ CD-R/RW‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WMA‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD±RW/DVD±R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ CD-RW/CD-R‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ” ” ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ”‪) “ALL‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪) “Check Regional Code‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺑﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺚ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ .Macrovision‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪،Macrovision‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺨﺼﺼﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﺺ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Macrovision‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ”‬
‫“ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﻊ ﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ‪ .Dolby Laboratories‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Dolby‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ double-D‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻱ ﻟﻮﺝ ”‪ “DVD Logo‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻱ ‪ /DVD‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻟﻮﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻛﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:08:44 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL61986213 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ a‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫• ‪) SETUP‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ :‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) COLOR/BRIGHT‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫• ‪ : MENU‬ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫• ‪) MODE‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‪ :‬ﻳﺨﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫]‪ [DISC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[USB‬‬
‫* ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) COLOR‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ ‪BRIGHT‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ b / B‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ c‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫• ‪) b B v V‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‪ :‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :ENTER‬ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ :‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺜﻨﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ e‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮ‬
‫‪)OPEN(Z) f‬ﻓﺘﺢ(‪ :‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ :USB‬ﺻﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪.USB Flash‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫•)‪ :N (Play) / X (Pause‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) (Stop) x‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ :‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) (SKIP) .‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻌﻲ * ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• >)‪) (SKIP‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ*ﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪) (/1 k‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :( Volume )w VOL l‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :AV OUT n‬ﻭﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :DC 9V IN o‬ﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:08:45 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL61986214 4‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(4‬‬
‫‪) (./>) SKIP/SEARCH‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ‪/‬ﺑﺤﺚ(‪ :‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ :SLOW (t / T‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪) SETUP‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ :‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :(DVD‬ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪ :vV b B‬ﻳﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫) ( ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ :‬ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) RETURN (O‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ(‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ CR. 2025‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) PROG.‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ :‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪ :‬ﻳﺰﻳﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Program‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪) TITLE‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺸﺒﻜﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣ ﹰﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ +‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ +‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DISPLAY‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ :‬ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) PAUSE/STEP (X‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺑﻄﻲﺀ(‪ :‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ‬
‫‪ /‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) PLAY (N‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ :‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) STOP (x‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ :‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‪ :‬ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :A-B‬ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫)‪) POWER (1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‬
‫( ‪) AUDIO‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪ :‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫) ( ‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ(‪:‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫) ( ‪) ANGLE‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪) ZOOM‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : MARKER‬ﻳﻀﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) SEARCH‬ﺑﺤﺚ(‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[Marker Search‬‬
‫)ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪) RANDOM‬ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :VIRTUAL SURROUND‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫• ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻧﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﻴﻤﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫) ‪ ٢١٢‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫)‪ ،Matsushita Elec. Ind. Co., Ltd. (Panasonic‬ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CR. 2025‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:08:48 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL61986215 5‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﺪﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﺎﺋﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ »ﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ«‬
‫ﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ »ﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 9‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ«‬
‫* ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ ٨,٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٦‬ﻑﻭﻟﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻨﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ )‪GRAND POWER ELECTRONIC TECHNOLOGY (SHENZHEN‬‬
‫‪.CO., LTD‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻔﻮﻟﻂ ‪ ٠,٥ ~ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻨﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.I-MAG ELECTRONICS(DONG GUAN) CO., LTD‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺻﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ‪ ٨٫٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٦‬ﻓﻮﻝﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋ ﹰﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﺎﺋﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻡﻧﺼﻬﺮ ‪ A١,٥‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ٢٥٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻡﻫﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻪﺍﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﺪﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﺎﺋﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺎﺫ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺼﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻒﺿﺖ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٧٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ١٥٨‬ﻑﻫﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﻻﻗﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬‫ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪..‬‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:08:49 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL61986216 6‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪) AV OUT‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﻃﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻀﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﹴ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ ‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻄﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻂﺀ ‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎ ﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫»ﺧﺮﺝ ‪.«AV‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪MODE‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ( ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ b / B‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [DISC‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ)ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪.USB Flash‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:08:50 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL61986217 7‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪SETUP‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪vV‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪vV‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪:‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ENTER / v V‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ vV b B‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ b B‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Enter‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Setup‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ – ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Original‬ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ( ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Other‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻜﺒﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ( ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[٤:٣‬ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫]‪ :[١٦:٩‬ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ‪.١٦:٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ – ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ‪ ،٤:٣‬ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[Letterbox‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[Panscan‬ﻳﻤﻸ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ‪ ٤:٣‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪) DRC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ( – ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪ Digital‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD karaoke‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻨﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ karaoke‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Area Code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪[Area Code‬‬
‫)ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .B‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫)ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻜﺒﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﹰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ( ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ »‪ «٢١٠٤٩٩‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Unlock‬‬
‫)ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ( ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ – ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ[‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫)ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ[‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻮﺩﹰﺍ ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:08:51 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL61986218 8‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ – REC Bitrate‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ)‪ USB ٩٦‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ( ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪.USB Flash‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،USB‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٤‬‬
‫‪) DivX(R) VOD‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ( – ﺇﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﺰﻭﺩﻙ ﺑﻜﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ DivX® VOD‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪.www.divx.com/vod‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‪) [Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ( ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ DivX® VOD‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) DISPLAY‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪vV‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫‪ENTER /b B‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪:‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ vV‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.b B‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪.9V IN‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﺜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫‪ ACD‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻭ‪ DVD±R/RW‬ﺍﳌﺼﺎﻏﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪ WMA‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪WMA‬‬
‫‪ DivX‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪DivX‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:08:53 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL61986219 9‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪١‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪) PAUSE/STEP (X‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪ /‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)‪) PLAY (N‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪OPEN(Z‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪) PAUSE/STEP (X‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪ /‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﹰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪PLAY N‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪:‬‬
‫‪VOLUME‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) REPEAT‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪STOP x‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪ACD‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SKIP‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ( )> ﺃﻭ ‪ (.‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SKIP‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪PLAY‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪) STOP (x‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮ ﺻﻴﻈﻬﺮ” ‪ “ Xx‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪) PLAY (N‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪) STOP (x‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺃﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “x‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫)‪ = Xx‬ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ = x ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ( ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ‪) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺃﻭ‪) OPEN‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ )‪(A-B‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ vV b B‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DVD VR‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ .(VR‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،DVD VR‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ vV‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)‪) PLAY (N‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،DVD-VR‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪TITLE‬‬
‫)ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-VR‬ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ CPRM‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪) DVD RECORDER‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪.(DVD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )>( ‪) SKIP‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ( ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪) SKIP (.‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪)SKIP (.‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ( ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪ACD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A-B‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﻭﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A-B‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫( ‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺒﺮﻫﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫) ( ‪) ANGLE‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫( ‪) AUDIO‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫)‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SLOW‬ﺑﻄﺊ( )‪ T‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ( t‬ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻜﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SLOW‬ﺑﻄﺊ( )‪ T‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ( t‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪) PLAY (N‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:08:54 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL619862110 10‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ZOOM‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ .vVb B‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪(٪١٠٠ p ٪٢٠٠ p ٪٣٠٠ p ٪٤٠٠ p ٪١٠٠) .‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪:‬‬
‫)‪OPEN(Z‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﹰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) TITLE‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ )‪.(٠-٩‬‬
‫‪ v V‬ﻭ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻟﻜﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) DISPLAY‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .ENTER‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ”‪ “11020‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺭﻗ ﹰﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ CLEAR‬ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫‪ACD‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) RANDOM‬ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ( ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) RANDOM‬ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) MARKER‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SEARCH‬ﺑﺤﺚ( ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[Marker Search‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬
‫)ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻪ ﺃﻭ ‪ CLEAR‬ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜ ﹰﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Stop‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜ ﹰﻴﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺀ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Virtual Surround‬‬
‫ﺗﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪VIRTUAL‬‬
‫‪ SURROUND‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Concert t Hall t Arena‬‬
‫ﻃﻠﺘﺨﻢ ﺻﺮﻕ– ﺗﺎﻓﻠﻢ ‪، DivX‬ﻭ‪MP3/WMA‬ﻭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺗﺤﺖ ﻳﺘﻼ ﺻﺎﺭﻗﻸﺍ ﺩﺣﺄ ﻟﻴﻐﺸﺖ ﺩﻧﻊ ﺗﺎﻓﻠﻢ ﻳﻠﻊ‪DivX‬ﻭ ‪MP3/WMA،‬ﻭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺩﺍﺭﻣﻼ ﺗﺎﻓﻠﻤﻼ ﺓﻣﺌﺎﻕ ﺭﺍﻳﺘﺨﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻜﻤﻲ ‪،‬ﹰﺍﻋﻢ ﻳﻠﻊ ﻃﻐﻀﻼ ﻗﻴﺮﻁ ﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﻠﻴﻐﺸﺖ ‪. .TITLE‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪PLAY N‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪STOP x‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ – DivX‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ‪ DivX‬ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫®‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ( ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ b B‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻮﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ DivX‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪) ٥٧٦×٧٢٠ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫• ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ DivX‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺣﺮ ﹰﻓﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ “avi.” : DivX‬ﻭ”‪ “mpg.‬ﻭ”‪“mpeg.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ SubRip (.srt / .txt) :‬ﻭ)‪ SAMI (.smi‬ﻭ‬
‫)‪ SubStation Alpha (.ssa/.txt‬ﻭ)‪ MicroDVD (.sub/.txt‬ﻭ)‪ VobSub (.sub‬ﻭ‬
‫)‪ SubViewer 2.0 (.sub/.txt‬ﻭ)‪ TMPlayer (.txt‬ﻭ)‪DVD Subtitle System (.txt‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ Codec‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ “DIVX3.xx” :‬ﻭ”‪ “DIVX4.xx‬ﻭ”‪ “DIVX5.xx‬ﻭ”‪ “MP43‬ﻭ”‪“3IVX‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ DivX ٦٫٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ “Dolby Digital” :‬ﻭ”‪ “PCM‬ﻭ”‪ “MP3‬ﻭ”‪“WMA‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ ٨-٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ ،(MP3‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ ٤٨ – ٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪(WMA‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ ٣٢٠– ٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ ،(MP3‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ ١٩٢ – ٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪،(WMA‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﻠﻒ ‪(DivX‬‬
‫• ‪ ،CD-R/RW‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ISO ٩٦٦٠:DVD±R/RW‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪) ٦٠٠‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:08:57 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL619862111 11‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪OPEN(Z‬‬
‫‪١‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪: .‬‬
‫)‪OPEN(Z‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﹰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﹰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪: .‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪: .‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٣‬ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪: .‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪.(٠-٩‬‬
‫‪ v V‬ﻭ ‪MENU‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ )‪.(٠-٩‬‬
‫‪ MENU‬ﻭ‪v V‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪PLAY N‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪STOP x‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.RETURN (O‬‬
‫‪PLAY N‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) PROG.‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ E‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clear All‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )‪(ID3 TAG‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪) DISPLAY‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ،Tag-ID٣‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫]‪ [No ID3 TAG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ “mp3.” :‬ﻭ”‪“wma.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ ٨-٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ ،(MP3‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ ٤٨ – ٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪(WMA‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ ٣٢٠– ٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ ،(MP3‬ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ ١٩٢ – ٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪.(WMA‬‬
‫• ‪ ،CD-R/RW‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ISO ٩٦٦٠:DVD±R/RW‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪) ٦٠٠‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪STOP x‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ vV b B‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ) ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ b B‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )> ﺃﻭ ‪) SKIP (.‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ vV‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪) PAUSE/STEP (X‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)‪) PLAY (N‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﻣ ﹰﻌﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ vV b B‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺭﻣﺰ ) ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ( ‪ ZOOM‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ .vV b B‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ( ‪ CLEAR‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪“jpg.” :‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫• ‪ ،CD-R/RW‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ISO ٩٦٦٠:DVD±R/RW‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪) ٦٠٠‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:08:58 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL619862112 12‬‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻦﻣ ﺮﺷﺎﺒﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﺠﺴﺘﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﶈﻤﻴﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛﺎ ﳊﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺮﳝﺔ ﺟﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺘﺮﻡ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ USB Flash‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [REC Bitrate‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ )‪.(٠-٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ v V‬ﻭ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪.٢٫٠/١٫١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.USB FlashAUDIO‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ AUDIO‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‪:‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ AUDIO‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪STOP .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫•‪ ٤‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪USB‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ »‪ «CD_REC‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ USB Flash‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ)ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،USB Flash‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ USB Flash‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ CD-G‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ USB ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻮﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪ ٩٦ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ ١٢٨ /‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪) ٦٠٠‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٢‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪: USB‬‬
‫‪MODE‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪: [USB‬‬
‫‪ENTER /b B‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ )‪.(٠-٩‬‬
‫‪v V MENU‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫‪N PLAY‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪:USB‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪USB‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ]‪ [DISC‬ﻭ]‪ [USB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MODE‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺨﻠﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ USB Flash‬ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﻓﻘﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﺎﻟﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،USB HUB‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )‪ (MP3/WMA‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ (JPEG‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .DivX‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ /‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ :USB Flash‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‪ 600‬ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:09:01 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL619862113 13‬‬
‫‪Shanghai‬‬
‫ﺔﺒﻌﻟ ﻞﻴﻐﺸﺗ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪SETUP‬‬
‫ﻳﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺑﻄﻬﻤﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Game‬ﻟﻌﺒﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [OTHERS‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪:‬‬
‫‪vV/B‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ :vV b B‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select‬ﺣﺪﺩ(‪:‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪5‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [GAME MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ(‪:‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪vV/‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪) (HELP) .١‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜ ﹰﻴﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) (BACK) .٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Black jack‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ Black jack‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻔﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻗﻪ ﻣﻦ ‪ .٢١‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ ﻭﻣﻮﺯﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻋﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺳﺤﺐ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ )ﺍﻛﺘﻔﺎﺀ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴ ﹰﻌﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ :‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :b‬ﺳﺤﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺍﻛﺘﻔﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :vV‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺍﻫﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠G‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.١٠٠G‬‬
‫‪ Same‬ﻟﻌﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪) RETURN‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ(‪ :‬ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ )‪ :(١-٩‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :vV b B‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Acorn‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻁ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺛﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺟﻤﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ :b‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪Othello‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻌﺐ ‪ Othello‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺡ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺼﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﹰﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺡ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫‪ :vV b B‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:09:02 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL619862114 14‬‬
‫ﺔﻐﻠﻟﺍ ﺯﻮﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻐﺘﻚ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) Disc Audio :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻭ‪) Disc Subtitle‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻭ‪) Disc Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻓﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﻬﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻣﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻣﻴﺰ ﹼﻳﺔ‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻷﳝﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺫﺭﺑﻴﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﻜﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺳﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻐﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺭﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻼﺭﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪٦٥٦٥‬‬
‫‪٦٥٧٠‬‬
‫‪٨٣٨١‬‬
‫‪٦٥٧٧‬‬
‫‪٦٥٨٢‬‬
‫‪٧٢٨٩‬‬
‫‪٦٥٨٣‬‬
‫‪٦٥٨٨‬‬
‫‪٦٥٩٠‬‬
‫‪٦٦٦٥‬‬
‫‪٦٩٨٥‬‬
‫‪٦٦٧٨‬‬
‫‪٦٨٩٠‬‬
‫‪٦٦٧٢‬‬
‫‪٦٦٨٢‬‬
‫‪٦٦٧١‬‬
‫‪٧٧٨٩‬‬
‫‪٦٦٦٩‬‬
‫‪٩٠٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﳕﺎﺭﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﳒﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺒﺮﺍﻧﺘﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻭﺯﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻴﺸﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻮﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﳌﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻮﺍﺭﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻮﺟﺎﺭﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪٧٢٨٢‬‬
‫‪٦٧٨٣‬‬
‫‪٦٨٦٥‬‬
‫‪٧٨٧٦‬‬
‫‪٦٩٧٨‬‬
‫‪٦٩٧٩‬‬
‫‪٦٩٨٤‬‬
‫‪٧٠٧٩‬‬
‫‪٧٠٧٤‬‬
‫‪٧٠٧٣‬‬
‫‪٧٠٨٢‬‬
‫‪٧٠٨٩‬‬
‫‪٧١٧٦‬‬
‫‪٧٥٦٥‬‬
‫‪٦٨٦٩‬‬
‫‪٦٩٧٦‬‬
‫‪٧٥٧٦‬‬
‫‪٧١٧٨‬‬
‫‪٧١٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻭﺳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻤﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺯﺍﺧﺎﺳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻏﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪٧٢٦٥‬‬
‫‪٧٣٨٧‬‬
‫‪٧٢٧٣‬‬
‫‪٧٢٨٥‬‬
‫‪٧٣٨٣‬‬
‫‪٧٣٧٨‬‬
‫‪٧٣٦٥‬‬
‫‪٧١٦٥‬‬
‫‪٧٣٨٤‬‬
‫‪٧٤٦٥‬‬
‫‪٧٥٧٨‬‬
‫‪٧٥٨٣‬‬
‫‪٧٥٧٥‬‬
‫‪٧٥٨٩‬‬
‫‪٧٥٧٩‬‬
‫‪٧٥٨٥‬‬
‫‪٧٦٧٩‬‬
‫‪٧٦٦٥‬‬
‫‪٧٦٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻨﺠﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻻﺟﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻻﻳﺎﻻﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﺭﺍﺛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﺪﻭﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻧﻐﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻭﺭﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺒﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺷﺘﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪٧٦٧٨‬‬
‫‪٧٦٨٤‬‬
‫‪٧٧٧٥‬‬
‫‪٧٧٧١‬‬
‫‪٧٧٨٣‬‬
‫‪٧٧٧٦‬‬
‫‪٧٧٧٣‬‬
‫‪٧٧٨٢‬‬
‫‪٧٧٧٩‬‬
‫‪٧٧٧٨‬‬
‫‪٧٨٦٥‬‬
‫‪٧٨٦٩‬‬
‫‪٧٨٧٩‬‬
‫‪٧٩٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٠٦٥‬‬
‫‪٨٠٨٣‬‬
‫‪٧٠٦٥‬‬
‫‪٨٠٧٦‬‬
‫‪٨٠٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻳﺘﺸﻮﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺘﻮ ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻳﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻜﺮﻳﺘ ﹼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻜﺘﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺟﺎﻟﻮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪٨١٨٥‬‬
‫‪٨٢٧٧‬‬
‫‪٨٢٧٩‬‬
‫‪٨٢٨٥‬‬
‫‪٨٣٧٧‬‬
‫‪٨٣٦٥‬‬
‫‪٧١٦٨‬‬
‫‪٨٣٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٣٧٢‬‬
‫‪٨٣٧٨‬‬
‫‪٨٣٦٨‬‬
‫‪٨٣٧٣‬‬
‫‪٨٣٧٥‬‬
‫‪٨٣٧٦‬‬
‫‪٦٩٨٣‬‬
‫‪٨٣٨٥‬‬
‫‪٨٣٨٧‬‬
‫‪٨٣٨٦‬‬
‫‪٨٤٧٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺟﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﳒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺑﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺘﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻻﺑﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﻠﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻛﺴﻮﺯﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﺸﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻟﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪٨٤٧١‬‬
‫‪٨٤٦٥‬‬
‫‪٨٤٦٩‬‬
‫‪٨٤٧٢‬‬
‫‪٨٤٧٩‬‬
‫‪٨٤٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٤٧٥‬‬
‫‪٨٤٨٧‬‬
‫‪٨٥٧٥‬‬
‫‪٨٥٨٢‬‬
‫‪٨٥٩٠‬‬
‫‪٨٦٧٣‬‬
‫‪٨٦٧٩‬‬
‫‪٦٧٨٩‬‬
‫‪٨٧٧٩‬‬
‫‪٨٨٧٢‬‬
‫‪٧٤٧٣‬‬
‫‪٨٩٧٩‬‬
‫‪٩٠٨٥‬‬
‫ﺔﻘﻄﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﺯﻮﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻐﺎﻧﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻨﺘﲔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﹸﻮﻟﹺﻴﻔﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﺯﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﲔ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻟﻮﻣﺒﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻧﻐﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪AU‬‬
‫‪AT‬‬
‫‪BE‬‬
‫‪BT‬‬
‫‪BO‬‬
‫‪BR‬‬
‫‪KH‬‬
‫‪CA‬‬
‫‪CL‬‬
‫‪CN‬‬
‫‪CO‬‬
‫‪CG‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺳﺘﺎﺭﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺮﻭﺍﺗﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﳕﺎﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻛﻮﺍﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻔﺎﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻴﻮﺑﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺠﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬
‫ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﻄﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻈﻤﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪CR‬‬
‫‪HR‬‬
‫‪CZ‬‬
‫‪DK‬‬
‫‪EC‬‬
‫‪EG‬‬
‫‪SV‬‬
‫‪ET‬‬
‫‪FJ‬‬
‫‪FI‬‬
‫‪FR‬‬
‫‪DE‬‬
‫‪GB‬‬
‫‪GR‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻮﱋ ﻛﻮﱋ‬
‫ﺍ‪‬ﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺮﺍﺋﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻨﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺒﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻛﺴﻤﺒﻮﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪GL‬‬
‫‪HK‬‬
‫‪HU‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪ID‬‬
‫‪IL‬‬
‫‪IT‬‬
‫‪JM‬‬
‫‪JP‬‬
‫‪KE‬‬
‫‪KW‬‬
‫‪LY‬‬
‫‪LU‬‬
‫‪MY‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺎﻟﺪﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﺎﻛﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻐﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻐﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻧﺘﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻼﻧﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺠﻴﺮﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪MV‬‬
‫‪MX‬‬
‫‪MC‬‬
‫‪MN‬‬
‫‪MA‬‬
‫‪NP‬‬
‫‪NL‬‬
‫‪AN‬‬
‫‪NZ‬‬
‫‪NG‬‬
‫‪NO‬‬
‫‪OM‬‬
‫‪PK‬‬
‫‪PA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪PY‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺍﺟﻮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪PH‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﲔ‬
‫‪PL‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫‪PT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻝ‬
‫‪RO‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻣﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫‪RU‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﺍﻻﲢﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ‪SA‬‬
‫‪SN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻐﺎﻝ‬
‫‪SG‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪SK‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺎ‬
‫‪SI‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻮﻓﻴﻨﻴﺎ‬
‫‪ZA‬‬
‫ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬
‫‪KR‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﳉﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ES‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻼﻧﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﺴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻏﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺟﻮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺯﺑﻜﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺘﻨﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺯﳝﺒﺎﺑﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪LK‬‬
‫‪SE‬‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫‪TW‬‬
‫‪TH‬‬
‫‪TR‬‬
‫‪UG‬‬
‫‪UA‬‬
‫‪US‬‬
‫‪UY‬‬
‫‪UZ‬‬
‫‪VN‬‬
‫‪ZW‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:09:03 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL619862115 15‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪) AUDIO‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺎﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) AUDIO‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪V ٩ DC‬‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ١٧٥ × *٣٢٫٧ × ٢٢١‬ﻣﻢ )ﻃﻮﻝ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺪﻡ‬
‫* ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫‪ ٠٫٧٨‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ °C ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪°C ٤٠‬‬
‫‪ % ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪% ٩٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ ø٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ‪١ x‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ١٫٠ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻉ(‪ ،Ω ٧٥ ،‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ١٫٥ :‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ – ‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ ٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﺒﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ ø٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ‪٢ x‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ٨٫٥‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )ﻗﻄﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫‪ TFT‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬
‫‪(WQVGA) ٢٣٤ × ٤٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٣٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ()‪(IM090WU-150B‬‬
‫• ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ )‪(Cu-2993‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺪ‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:09:05 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL619862116 16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ a‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺟﻠﻮﺳﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪..‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻟﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻠﻌﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺜﺒﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‪:‬‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻌﺪ‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫• ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ c‬ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻔﻚ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ e‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﻤﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺮﺩ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻟﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ c‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺛﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﺭﻛﺐ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ e‬ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪3/18/09 8:09:07 PM‬‬
‫‪DP482B-P.AARELLK_ARAB_MFL619862117 17‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising